Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
4c10bbaa
L
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
caa65211
L
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
cd6d6c15
NC
1235@end table
1236
ece2d90e 1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
69da35b5
NC
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1264recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1270
4a43e768
AM
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1279needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1288
e56f61be
L
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1297
252b5132
RH
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1314
a1ab1d2a
UD
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1322
252b5132
RH
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1327@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1340libraries.
252b5132
RH
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1347within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1352
40b36307
L
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1361libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1362
55255dae
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
40b36307
L
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
0b8a70d9
L
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1392@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
252b5132 1402
ddbb8a31
NC
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1409command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1411input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1417libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1423symbols.
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1436definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
252b5132 1439
4818e05f
AM
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
252b5132 1458@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1474@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1488@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
9b8b325a
RF
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
7ce691ae 1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1506@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1528targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1533
d5465ba2
AM
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
ac69cbc6 1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1545@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
c17d87de
NC
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
30824704
RM
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
3604cb1f
TG
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
252b5132
RH
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
ea20a7da
CC
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1596@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1604necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1608@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1609@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1610@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1615libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1616
aa713662
L
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
b79e8c78 1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
903249d7
NC
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
b79e8c78 1657
31941635
L
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
3e3b46e5
PB
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1680errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
fe7929ce
AM
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
0a9c1c8e
CD
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
252b5132 1708@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1714object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
76359541
TP
1724@kindex --out-implib
1725@item --out-implib @var{file}
1726Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
36af4a4e
JJ
1734@kindex -pie
1735@kindex --pic-executable
1736@item -pie
1737@itemx --pic-executable
1738@cindex position independent executables
1739Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1742address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1743normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
252b5132
RH
1746@kindex -qmagic
1747@item -qmagic
1748This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750@kindex -Qy
1751@item -Qy
1752This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754@kindex --relax
1755@cindex synthesizing linker
1756@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1757@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1758@item --relax
28d5f677 1759@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1760An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1761@ifset GENERIC
1762This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763@end ifset
1764@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1765@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1766@end ifset
1767@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1768@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1769@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1770@ifset XTENSA
1771@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1773@ifset M68HC11
1774@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1776@ifset NIOSII
1777@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1779@ifset POWERPC
1780@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781@end ifset
252b5132 1782
28d5f677
NC
1783On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1787instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1788
1789On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1792This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1794@end ifset
1795
1796@ifset GENERIC
1797On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798but ignored.
1799@end ifset
1800
28d5f677
NC
1801On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
252b5132
RH
1804@cindex retaining specified symbols
1805@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1809Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812@ifset GENERIC
1813(such as VxWorks)
1814@end ifset
1815where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816run-time memory.
1817
1818@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1825@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1826@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1827@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1828Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1829linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1830arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1831them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1832also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1834@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1835ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
ff5dcc92 1838The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1839SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1840@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1844file systems.
252b5132 1845
ff5dcc92 1846For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1847followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1848the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1849@end ifset
1850
1851@ifset GENERIC
1852@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1855When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857of the input files.
1858
1859When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1862explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1863specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1864@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1865either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866appearing multiple times.
1867
28c309a2
NC
1868This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1869that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1870is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1871runtime linker would do.
1872
252b5132 1873The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1874libraries:
252b5132
RH
1875@enumerate
1876@item
ff5dcc92 1877Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1878@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1879Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1880between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1881specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1882used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1883at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1884by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1885the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1886@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1887On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1888@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1889environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1890@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1891On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1892directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1893@item
a1b8d843 1894For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1895variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1896@item
ec4eb78a
L
1897For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1898@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1899libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1900@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1901@item
252b5132
RH
1902The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1903@item
1904For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1905exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1906@end enumerate
1907
1908If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1909warning and continue with the link.
1910@end ifset
1911
1912@kindex -shared
1913@kindex -Bshareable
1914@item -shared
1915@itemx -Bshareable
1916@cindex shared libraries
1917Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1918and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1919shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1920undefined symbols in the link.
1921
252b5132 1922@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1923@item --sort-common
1924@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1925@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1926This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1927ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1928sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1929eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1930between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1931specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1932
2509a395
SL
1933@kindex --sort-section=name
1934@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1935This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1936patterns in the linker script.
1937
2509a395
SL
1938@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1939@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1940This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1941patterns in the linker script.
1942
252b5132 1943@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1944@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1945Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1946each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1947size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1948
1949@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1950@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1951Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1952output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1953This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1954certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1955cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1956that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1957support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1958input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1959more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1960many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1961
1962@kindex --stats
1963@item --stats
1964Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1965as execution time and memory usage.
1966
2509a395 1967@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1968@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1969Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1970configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1971that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1972
252b5132
RH
1973@kindex --traditional-format
1974@cindex traditional format
1975@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1976For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1977the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1978use the traditional format instead.
1979
1980@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1981For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1982symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1983full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1984@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1985trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1986combine duplicate entries.
1987
2509a395
SL
1988@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1989@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1990Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1991address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1992times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1993line.
1994@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1995for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1996@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1997should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1998sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1999
2509a395
SL
2000@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2001@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2002@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2003@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2004@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2005@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2006@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2007Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2008@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2009
2509a395
SL
2010@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2011@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2012@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2013When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2014byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2015
9d5777a3
RM
2016@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2017@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2018@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2019When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2020the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2021text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2022
0d705e9f
AM
2023@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2024@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2025@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2026When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2027model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2028
560e09e9
NC
2029@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2030@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2031Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2032values for @samp{method}:
2033
2034@table @samp
2035@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2036Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2037
2038@item report-all
da8bce14 2039Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2040
2041@item ignore-in-object-files
2042Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2043ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2044
2045@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2046Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2047ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2048when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2049libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2050command line.
2051@end table
2052
2053The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2054by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2055
2056Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2057unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2058can change this to a warning.
2059
1715a13c
L
2060@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2061@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2062@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2063@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2064Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2065supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2066the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2067argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2068
2069@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2070@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2071@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2072Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2073used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2074about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2075is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2076see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2077use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2078symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2079@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2080
7ce691ae 2081@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2082@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2083@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2084@item --warn-common
2085Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2086a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2087but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2088you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2089Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2090warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2091
2092There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2093
2094@table @samp
2095@item int i = 1;
2096A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2097file.
2098
2099@item extern int i;
2100An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2101There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2102variable somewhere.
2103
2104@item int i;
2105A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2106variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2107The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2108single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2109size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2110a definition of the same variable.
2111@end table
2112
2113The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2114Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2115just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2116encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2117a common symbol.
2118
2119@enumerate
2120@item
2121Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2122definition for the symbol.
2123@smallexample
2124@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overridden by definition
2126@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2127@end smallexample
2128
2129@item
2130Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2131the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2132except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2133@smallexample
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overriding common
2136@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2137@end smallexample
2138
2139@item
2140Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2141@smallexample
2142@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2143 of `@var{symbol}'
2144@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2145@end smallexample
2146
2147@item
2148Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2149@smallexample
2150@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overridden by larger common
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2153@end smallexample
2154
2155@item
2156Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2157the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2158encountered in a different order.
2159@smallexample
2160@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overriding smaller common
2162@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2163@end smallexample
2164@end enumerate
2165
2166@kindex --warn-constructors
2167@item --warn-constructors
2168Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2169object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2170detect the use of global constructors.
2171
2172@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2173@item --warn-multiple-gp
2174Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2175This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2176Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2177section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2178of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2179base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2180base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2181bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2182large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2183values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2184option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2185
2186@kindex --warn-once
2187@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2188@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2189@item --warn-once
2190Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2191which refers to it.
2192
2193@kindex --warn-section-align
2194@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2195@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2196@item --warn-section-align
2197Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2198alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2199The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2200is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2201the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2202
8fdd7217
NC
2203@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2204@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2205Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2206
a0c402a5
L
2207@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2208@item --warn-alternate-em
2209Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2210
560e09e9
NC
2211@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2212@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2213If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2214@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2215This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2216
2217@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2218@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2219This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2220it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2221
252b5132
RH
2222@kindex --whole-archive
2223@cindex including an entire archive
2224@item --whole-archive
2225For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2226@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2227in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2228files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2229library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2230library. This option may be used more than once.
2231
7ec229ce 2232Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2233about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2234Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2235list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2236your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2237
2509a395
SL
2238@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2239@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2240Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2241@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2242undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2243@var{symbol}.
2244
2245This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2246wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2247wishes to call the system function, it should call
2248@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2249
2250Here is a trivial example:
2251
2252@smallexample
2253void *
cc2f008e 2254__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2255@{
cc2f008e 2256 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2257 return __real_malloc (c);
2258@}
2259@end smallexample
2260
ff5dcc92 2261If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2262all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2263instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2264call the real @code{malloc} function.
2265
2266You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2267links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2268you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2269file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2270call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2271
6aa29e7b 2272@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2273@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2274@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2275@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2276Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2277(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2278section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2279
e41b3a13
JJ
2280@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2281@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2282Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2283generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2284if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2285
6c1439be
L
2286@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2287@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2288@item --enable-new-dtags
2289@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2290This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2291systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2292@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2293and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2294If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2295created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2296those options are only available for ELF systems.
2297
2d643429 2298@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2299@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2300Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2301close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2302time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2303increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2304value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2305
fdc90cb4
JJ
2306@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2307@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2308Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2309@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2310new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2311the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2312hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2313
0ce398f1
L
2314@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2315@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2316@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2317@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2318@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2319@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2320@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2321@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2322On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2323compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2324compress DWARF debug sections.
2325@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2326sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2327instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2328and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2329compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2330The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2331the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2332determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2333
35835446
JR
2334@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2335@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2336This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2337linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2338for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2339about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2340
4f9c04f7 2341Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23421021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2343run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2344has been used.
2345
2346The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2347enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2348
c0065db7
RM
2349@kindex --build-id
2350@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2351@item --build-id
2352@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2353Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2354or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2355unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2356@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2357@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2358@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2359the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2360string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2361@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2362is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2363
2364The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2365that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2366unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2367to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2368file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2369string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2370
2371Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2372@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2373@end table
2374
0285c67d
NC
2375@c man end
2376
36f63dca 2377@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2378
0285c67d
NC
2379@c man begin OPTIONS
2380
ff5dcc92 2381The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2382the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2383normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2384use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2385@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2386like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2387symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2388object file).
2389
2390In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2391support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2392PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2393values by either a space or an equals sign.
2394
ff5dcc92 2395@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2398@item --add-stdcall-alias
2399If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2400as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2402
2403@kindex --base-file
2404@item --base-file @var{file}
2405Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2406addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2407@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2408[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2409
2410@kindex --dll
2411@item --dll
2412Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2413@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2414file.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2416
88183869
DK
2417@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2418@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2419@item --enable-long-section-names
2420@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2421The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2422the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2423for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2424fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2425to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2426allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2427disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2428generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2429as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2430with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2431GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2432information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2433option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2434section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2435when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2436image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2437[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2438
252b5132
RH
2439@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2440@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2441@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2442@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2443If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2444do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2445only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2446resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2447undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2448@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2449to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2450warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2451import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2452to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2453feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2454@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2455mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2456[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2457
522f09cd
KT
2458@kindex --leading-underscore
2459@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2460@item --leading-underscore
2461@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2462For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2463in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2464disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2465
252b5132
RH
2466@cindex DLLs, creating
2467@kindex --export-all-symbols
2468@item --export-all-symbols
2469If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2470be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2471otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2472explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2473attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2474option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2475@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2476@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2477exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2478re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2479such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2480@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2481@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2482Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2483not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2484extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2485(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2486These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2487@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2488@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2489@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2490@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2491[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2492
2493@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2494@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2495Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2496exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2498
2927aaca
NC
2499@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2500@item --exclude-all-symbols
2501Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
252b5132
RH
2504@kindex --file-alignment
2505@item --file-alignment
2506Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2507file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2508512.
bb10df36 2509[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@cindex heap size
2512@kindex --heap
2513@item --heap @var{reserve}
2514@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2515Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2516to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2517committed.
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2519
2520@cindex image base
2521@kindex --image-base
2522@item --image-base @var{value}
2523Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2524the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2525is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2526your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2527other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2528for dlls.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@kindex --kill-at
2532@item --kill-at
2533If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2534symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2535[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2536
26d2d8a2
BF
2537@kindex --large-address-aware
2538@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2539If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2540header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2541greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2542or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2543section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2544[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2545
f69a2f97
NC
2546@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2547@item --disable-large-address-aware
2548Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2549This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2550driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2551addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2552[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2553
252b5132
RH
2554@kindex --major-image-version
2555@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2556Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2558
2559@kindex --major-os-version
2560@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2561Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2565@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2566Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2568
2569@kindex --minor-image-version
2570@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2571Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2573
2574@kindex --minor-os-version
2575@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2576Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2578
2579@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2580@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2581Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@cindex DEF files, creating
2585@cindex DLLs, creating
2586@kindex --output-def
2587@item --output-def @var{file}
2588The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2589file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2590(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2591library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2592automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2594
b044cda1 2595@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2596@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2597@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2598@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2599Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2600@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2601By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2602for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2603execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2605
2606@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2607@item --disable-auto-image-base
2608Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2609user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2610default.
bb10df36 2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2612
2613@cindex DLLs, linking to
2614@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2615@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2616When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2617search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2618@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2619between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2620uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2621@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2623
2624@kindex --enable-auto-import
2625@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2626Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2627DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2628building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2629'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2630to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2631specification published by Microsoft.
2632
e2a83dd0
NC
2633Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2634data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2635placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2636around a problem with consts that is described here:
2637http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2638
4d8907ac
DS
2639Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2640see this message:
0d888aac 2641
ece2d90e 2642"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2643documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2644
ece2d90e
NC
2645This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2646ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2647allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2648fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2649constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2650multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2651this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2652of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2653the warning, and exit.
2654
2655There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2656data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2657
2fa9fc65
NC
2658One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2659of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2660this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2661
c0065db7
RM
2662A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2663that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2664there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2665a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2666
2667@example
2668extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2669extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2670 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2671@end example
2672
2673or
2674
2675@example
2676extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2677extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2678 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2679@end example
2680
c0065db7 2681For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2682is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2683
2684@example
2685extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2686extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2687 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2688@end example
2689
c406afaf
NC
2690or
2691
2692@example
2693extern long long extern_ll;
2694extern_ll -->
2695 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2696@end example
2697
2fa9fc65 2698A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2699'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2700@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2701requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2702building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2703merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2704between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2705constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2706
2707Original:
2708@example
2709--foo.h
2710extern int arr[];
2711--foo.c
2712#include "foo.h"
2713void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2714 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2715@}
2716@end example
2717
2718Solution 1:
2719@example
2720--foo.h
2721extern int arr[];
2722--foo.c
2723#include "foo.h"
2724void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2725 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2726 volatile int *parr = arr;
2727 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2728@}
2729@end example
2730
2731Solution 2:
2732@example
2733--foo.h
2734/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2735#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2736 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2737#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2738#else
2739#define FOO_IMPORT
2740#endif
2741extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2742--foo.c
2743#include "foo.h"
2744void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2745 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2746@}
2747@end example
2748
c0065db7 2749A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2750library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2751for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2752functions).
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2754
2755@kindex --disable-auto-import
2756@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2757Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2758@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2760
2fa9fc65
NC
2761@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2764that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2765a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2766environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2767[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2768
2769@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2770@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2771Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2772DLLs.
bb10df36 2773[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2774
b044cda1
CW
2775@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2776@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2777Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2778[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2779
252b5132
RH
2780@kindex --section-alignment
2781@item --section-alignment
2782Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2783addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2784[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2785
2786@cindex stack size
2787@kindex --stack
2788@item --stack @var{reserve}
2789@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2790Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2791to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2792committed.
bb10df36 2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2794
2795@kindex --subsystem
2796@item --subsystem @var{which}
2797@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2798@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2799Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2800legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2801@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2802the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2803@var{which}.
bb10df36 2804[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2805
2f563b51
DK
2806The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2807of the PE file header:
2808[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2809
2d5c3743
NC
2810@kindex --high-entropy-va
2811@item --high-entropy-va
2812Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2813(ASLR).
2814
2f563b51
DK
2815@kindex --dynamicbase
2816@item --dynamicbase
2817The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2818randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2819Vista for i386 PE targets.
2820
2821@kindex --forceinteg
2822@item --forceinteg
2823Code integrity checks are enforced.
2824
2825@kindex --nxcompat
2826@item --nxcompat
2827The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2828This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2829
2830@kindex --no-isolation
2831@item --no-isolation
2832Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2833
2834@kindex --no-seh
2835@item --no-seh
2836The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2837this image.
2838
2839@kindex --no-bind
2840@item --no-bind
2841Do not bind this image.
2842
2843@kindex --wdmdriver
2844@item --wdmdriver
2845The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2846
2f563b51
DK
2847@kindex --tsaware
2848@item --tsaware
2849The image is Terminal Server aware.
2850
0cb112f7
CF
2851@kindex --insert-timestamp
2852@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2853@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2854Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2855as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2856other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2857will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2858same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2859can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2860that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2861identically.
252b5132
RH
2862@end table
2863
0285c67d
NC
2864@c man end
2865
ac145307
BS
2866@ifset C6X
2867@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2868
2869@c man begin OPTIONS
2870
2871The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2872libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2873all executables use an index of 0.
2874
2875@table @gcctabopt
2876
2877@kindex --dsbt-size
2878@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2879This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2880or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2881entries.
2882
2883@kindex --dsbt-index
2884@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2885This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2886to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2887executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2888@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2889
fbd9ad90
PB
2890@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2891The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2892exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2893
ac145307
BS
2894@end table
2895
2896@c man end
2897@end ifset
2898
93fd0973
SC
2899@ifset M68HC11
2900@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2901
2902@c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2905memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2906
2907@table @gcctabopt
2908
2909@kindex --no-trampoline
2910@item --no-trampoline
2911This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2912is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2913instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2914
2915@kindex --bank-window
2916@item --bank-window @var{name}
2917This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2918the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2919The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2920paging and addresses within the memory window.
2921
2922@end table
2923
2924@c man end
2925@end ifset
2926
7fb9f789
NC
2927@ifset M68K
2928@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2929
2930@c man begin OPTIONS
2931
2932The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2933when linking for 68K targets.
2934
2935@table @gcctabopt
2936
2937@kindex --got
2938@item --got=@var{type}
2939This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2940@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2941@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2942Info entry for @file{ld}.
2943
2944@end table
2945
2946@c man end
2947@end ifset
2948
833794fc
MR
2949@ifset MIPS
2950@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2951
2952@c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2955generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2956
2957@table @gcctabopt
2958
2959@kindex --insn32
2960@item --insn32
2961@kindex --no-insn32
2962@itemx --no-insn32
2963These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2964generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2965or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
296632-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2967used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2968possible.
2969
2970@end table
2971
2972@c man end
2973@end ifset
2974
252b5132
RH
2975@ifset UsesEnvVars
2976@node Environment
2977@section Environment Variables
2978
0285c67d
NC
2979@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2980
560e09e9 2981You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2982@ifclear SingleFormat
2983@code{GNUTARGET},
2984@end ifclear
2985@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2986
36f63dca 2987@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2988@kindex GNUTARGET
2989@cindex default input format
2990@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2991use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2992of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2993@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2994of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2995attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2996this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2997there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2998object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2999BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3000in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3001@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3002
3003@kindex LDEMULATION
3004@cindex default emulation
3005@cindex emulation, default
3006@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3007@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3008behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3009available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3010the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3011variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3012linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3013
3014@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3015@cindex demangling, default
3016Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3017@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3018default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3019a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3020may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3021options.
3022
0285c67d
NC
3023@c man end
3024@end ifset
3025
252b5132
RH
3026@node Scripts
3027@chapter Linker Scripts
3028
3029@cindex scripts
3030@cindex linker scripts
3031@cindex command files
3032Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3033written in the linker command language.
3034
3035The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3036the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3037the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3038more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3039direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3040described below.
3041
3042The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3043yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3044linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3045to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3046such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3047
3048You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3049line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3050default linker script.
3051
3052You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3053to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3054Linker Scripts}.
3055
3056@menu
3057* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3058* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3059* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3060* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3061* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3062* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3063* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3064* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3065* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3066* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3067* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3068@end menu
3069
3070@node Basic Script Concepts
3071@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3072@cindex linker script concepts
3073We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3074describe the linker script language.
3075
3076The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3077file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3078@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3079The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3080purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3081among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3082section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3083in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3084
3085Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3086also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3087contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3088the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3089A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3090area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3091loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3092which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3093of debugging information.
3094
3095Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3096first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3097the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3098@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3099section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3100same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3101is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3102(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3103based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3104RAM address would be the VMA.
3105
3106You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3107program with the @samp{-h} option.
3108
3109Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3110@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3111has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3112information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3113will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3114static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3115referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3116
3117You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3118program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3119option.
3120
3121@node Script Format
3122@section Linker Script Format
3123@cindex linker script format
3124Linker scripts are text files.
3125
3126You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3127either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3128symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3129generally ignored.
3130
3131Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3132If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3133otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3134double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3135file name.
3136
3137You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3138@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3139to whitespace.
3140
3141@node Simple Example
3142@section Simple Linker Script Example
3143@cindex linker script example
3144@cindex example of linker script
3145Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3146
3147The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3148@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3149memory layout of the output file.
3150
3151The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3152describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3153code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3154@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3155Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3156your input files.
3157
3158For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31590x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3160linker script which will do that:
3161@smallexample
3162SECTIONS
3163@{
3164 . = 0x10000;
3165 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3166 . = 0x8000000;
3167 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3168 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3169@}
3170@end smallexample
3171
3172You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3173followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3174descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3175
252b5132
RH
3176The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3177sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3178counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3179other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3180current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3181incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3182@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3183
3184The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3185required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3186after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3187which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3188wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3189means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3190
3191Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3192@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3193@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3194
3195The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3196the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3197at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3198output section, the value of the location counter will be
3199@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3200effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3201immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3202
3203The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3204alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3205example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3206sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3207may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3208sections.
3209
3210That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3211
3212@node Simple Commands
3213@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3214@cindex linker script simple commands
3215In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3216
3217@menu
3218* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3219* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3220@ifclear SingleFormat
3221* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3222@end ifclear
3223
4a93e180 3224* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3225* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3226@end menu
3227
3228@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3229@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3230@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231@cindex start of execution
3232@cindex first instruction
3233@cindex entry point
3234The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3235point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3236entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3237@smallexample
3238ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3239@end smallexample
3240
3241There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3242entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3243stopping when one of them succeeds:
3244@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3245@item
252b5132 3246the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3247@item
252b5132 3248the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3249@item
3ab904c4
NC
3250the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3251targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3252check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3253@item
252b5132 3254the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3255@item
252b5132
RH
3256The address @code{0}.
3257@end itemize
3258
3259@node File Commands
36f63dca 3260@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3261@cindex linker script file commands
3262Several linker script commands deal with files.
3263
3264@table @code
3265@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3266@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3267@cindex including a linker script
3268Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3269be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3270with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
327110 levels deep.
3272
4006703d
NS
3273You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3274@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3275
252b5132
RH
3276@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3277@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3278@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3279@cindex input files in linker scripts
3280@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3281@cindex linker script input object files
3282The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3283in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3284
3285For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3286a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3287then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3288
3289In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3290script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3291
e3f2db7f
AO
3292In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3293with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3294located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3295for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3296open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3297linker will search through the archive library search path.
3298The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3299as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3300description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3301
ff5dcc92 3302If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3303name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3304@samp{-l}.
3305
3306When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3307files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3308script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3309
3310@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3311@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3312@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3313@cindex grouping input files
3314The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3315files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3316new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3317in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3318
b717d30e
JJ
3319@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3320@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3321@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3322This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3323commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3324as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3325with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3326when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3327@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3328and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3329setting afterwards.
3330
252b5132
RH
3331@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3332@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3333@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3334The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3335@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3336@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3337Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3338precedence.
3339
3340You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3341output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3342
3343@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3344@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3345@cindex library search path in linker script
3346@cindex archive search path in linker script
3347@cindex search path in linker script
3348The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3349@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3350@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3351on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3352are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3353the command line option are searched first.
3354
3355@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3356@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3357@cindex first input file
3358The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3359that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3360though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3361when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3362first file.
3363@end table
3364
3365@ifclear SingleFormat
3366@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3367@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3368A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3369
3370@table @code
3371@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3372@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3373@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3374@cindex output file format in linker script
3375The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3376output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3377exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3378(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3379line option takes precedence.
3380
3381You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3382formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3383This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3384desired endianness.
3385
3386If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3387will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3388output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3389used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3390
3391For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3392command:
3393@smallexample
3394OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3395@end smallexample
3396This says that the default format for the output file is
3397@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3398option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3399format.
3400
3401@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3402@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3403@cindex input file format in linker script
3404The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3405files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3406This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3407(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3408is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3409command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3410@end table
3411@end ifclear
3412
4a93e180
NC
3413@node REGION_ALIAS
3414@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3415@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416@cindex region alias
3417@cindex region names
3418
3419Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3420@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3421
3422@smallexample
3423REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3424@end smallexample
3425
3426The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3427memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3428to memory regions. An example follows.
3429
3430Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3431memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3432that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3433non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3434access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3435read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3436sections:
3437
3438@itemize @bullet
3439@item
3440@code{.text} program code;
3441@item
3442@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3443@item
3444@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3445@item
3446@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3447@end itemize
3448
3449The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3450part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3451output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3452systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3453@code{C}:
3454@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3455@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3456@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3457@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3458@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3459@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3460@end multitable
3461The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3462loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3463the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3464the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3465
3466The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3467includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3468memory layout:
3469@smallexample
3470INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3471
3472SECTIONS
3473 @{
3474 .text :
3475 @{
3476 *(.text)
3477 @} > REGION_TEXT
3478 .rodata :
3479 @{
3480 *(.rodata)
3481 rodata_end = .;
3482 @} > REGION_RODATA
3483 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3484 @{
3485 data_start = .;
3486 *(.data)
3487 @} > REGION_DATA
3488 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3489 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3490 .bss :
3491 @{
3492 *(.bss)
3493 @} > REGION_BSS
3494 @}
3495@end smallexample
3496
3497Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3498regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3499variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3500@table @code
3501@item A
3502Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3503@smallexample
3504MEMORY
3505 @{
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3507 @}
3508
3509REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3510REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3511REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513@end smallexample
3514@item B
3515Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3516into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3517@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3518@smallexample
3519MEMORY
3520 @{
3521 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3522 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3523 @}
3524
3525REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3526REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3527REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3528REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3529@end smallexample
3530@item C
3531Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3532@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3533initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3534system start into the @code{RAM}.
3535@smallexample
3536MEMORY
3537 @{
3538 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3539 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3540 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3541 @}
3542
3543REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3544REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3545REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3546REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3547@end smallexample
3548@end table
3549
3550It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3551@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3552necessary:
3553@smallexample
3554#include <string.h>
3555
3556extern char data_start [];
3557extern char data_size [];
3558extern char data_load_start [];
3559
3560void copy_data(void)
3561@{
3562 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3563 @{
3564 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3565 @}
3566@}
3567@end smallexample
3568
252b5132 3569@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3570@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3571There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3572
3573@table @code
3574@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3575@kindex ASSERT
3576@cindex assertion in linker script
3577Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3578with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3579
fd1c4238
NC
3580Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3581take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3582inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3583for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3584symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3585
3586@smallexample
3587 .stack :
3588 @{
3589 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3590 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3591 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3592 @}
3593@end smallexample
3594
3595will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3596PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3597can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3598
3599@smallexample
3600 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3601 .stack :
3602 @{
3603 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3604 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3605 @}
3606@end smallexample
3607
3608will work.
3609
252b5132
RH
3610@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3611@kindex EXTERN
3612@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3613Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3614symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3615modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3616each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3617command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3618
3619@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3621@cindex common allocation in linker script
3622This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3623to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3624output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3625
4818e05f
AM
3626@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3627@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3628@cindex common allocation in linker script
3629This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3630command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3631to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3632
53d25da6
AM
3633@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3634@kindex INSERT
3635@cindex insert user script into default script
3636This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3637augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3638inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3639@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3640default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3641sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3642linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3643insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3644linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3645default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3646of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3647to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3648is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3649
3650@smallexample
3651SECTIONS
3652@{
3653 OVERLAY :
3654 @{
3655 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3656 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3657 @}
3658@}
3659INSERT AFTER .text;
3660@end smallexample
3661
252b5132
RH
3662@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3663@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3664@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3665This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3666references among certain output sections.
3667
3668In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3669using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3670will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3671errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3672a function defined in the other section.
3673
3674The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3675@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3676an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3677@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3678names.
3679
cdf96953
MF
3680@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3681@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3682@cindex cross references
3683This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3684references to one section from a list of other sections.
3685
3686The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3687output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3688a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3689there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3690must never call back.
3691
3692The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3693The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3694If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3695the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3696status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3697names, not input section names.
3698
252b5132
RH
3699@ifclear SingleFormat
3700@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3701@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3702@cindex machine architecture
3703@cindex architecture
3704Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3705of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3706architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3707the @samp{-f} option.
3708@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3709
3710@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3711@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3712This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3713@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3714in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3715@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3716@end table
3717
3718@node Assignments
3719@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3720@cindex assignment in scripts
3721@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3722@cindex variables, defining
3723You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3724the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3725
3726@menu
3727* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3728* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3729* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3730* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3731* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3732@end menu
3733
3734@node Simple Assignments
3735@subsection Simple Assignments
3736
3737You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3738
3739@table @code
3740@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3741@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3742@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3743@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3744@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3745@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3746@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3747@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3748@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3749@end table
3750
3751The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3752@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3753defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3754
3755The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3756may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3757
3758The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3759
3760Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3761
3762You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3763statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3764section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3765
3766The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3767expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3768
3769Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3770assignments may be used:
3771
3772@smallexample
3773floating_point = 0;
3774SECTIONS
3775@{
3776 .text :
3777 @{
3778 *(.text)
3779 _etext = .;
3780 @}
156e34dd 3781 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3782 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3783@}
3784@end smallexample
3785@noindent
3786In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3787zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3788the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3789defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3790upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3791
eb8476a6
MR
3792@node HIDDEN
3793@subsection HIDDEN
3794@cindex HIDDEN
3795For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3796exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3797
3798Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3799@code{HIDDEN}:
3800
3801@smallexample
3802HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3803SECTIONS
3804@{
3805 .text :
3806 @{
3807 *(.text)
3808 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3809 @}
3810 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3811 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3812@}
3813@end smallexample
3814@noindent
3815In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3816
252b5132
RH
3817@node PROVIDE
3818@subsection PROVIDE
3819@cindex PROVIDE
3820In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3821only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3822the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3823@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3824@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3825@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3826@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3827@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3828
3829Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3830@smallexample
3831SECTIONS
3832@{
3833 .text :
3834 @{
3835 *(.text)
3836 _etext = .;
3837 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3838 @}
3839@}
3840@end smallexample
3841
3842In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3843underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3844the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3845underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3846If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3847linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3848
7af8e998
L
3849@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3850@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3851@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3852Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3853hidden and won't be exported.
3854
73ae6183
NC
3855@node Source Code Reference
3856@subsection Source Code Reference
3857
3858Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3859intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3860a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3861symbol that does not have a value.
3862
3863Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3864transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3865stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3866prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3867mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3868of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3869variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3870linker script variable might be referred to as:
3871
3872@smallexample
3873 extern int foo;
3874@end smallexample
3875
3876But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3877
3878@smallexample
3879 _foo = 1000;
3880@end smallexample
3881
3882In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3883transformation has taken place.
3884
3885When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3886things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3887in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3888second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3889table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3890contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3891value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3892
3893@smallexample
3894 int foo = 1000;
3895@end smallexample
3896
10bf6894 3897creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3898holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3899number 1000 is initially stored.
3900
3901When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3902first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3903memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3904So:
3905
3906@smallexample
3907 foo = 1;
3908@end smallexample
3909
3910looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3911associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3912address. Whereas:
3913
3914@smallexample
3915 int * a = & foo;
3916@end smallexample
3917
10bf6894 3918looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3919and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3920the variable @samp{a}.
3921
3922Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3923the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3924an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3925
3926@smallexample
3927 foo = 1000;
3928@end smallexample
3929
3930creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3931the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3932address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3933linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3934access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3935
3936Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3937you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3938use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3939section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3940linker script contains these declarations:
3941
3942@smallexample
3943@group
3944 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3945 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3946 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3947@end group
3948@end smallexample
3949
3950Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3951
3952@smallexample
3953@group
3954 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3955
73ae6183
NC
3956 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3957@end group
3958@end smallexample
3959
3960Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3961Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3962arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3963
3964@smallexample
3965@group
3966 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3967
3968 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3969@end group
3970@end smallexample
3971
3972Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3973operators.
73ae6183 3974
252b5132 3975@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3976@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3977@kindex SECTIONS
3978The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3979into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3980
3981The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3982@smallexample
3983SECTIONS
3984@{
3985 @var{sections-command}
3986 @var{sections-command}
3987 @dots{}
3988@}
3989@end smallexample
3990
3991Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3992
3993@itemize @bullet
3994@item
3995an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3996@item
3997a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3998@item
3999an output section description
4000@item
4001an overlay description
4002@end itemize
4003
4004The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4005@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4006those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4007understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4008the layout of the output file.
4009
4010Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4011below.
4012
4013If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4014linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4015section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4016input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4017example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4018in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4019
4020@menu
4021* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4022* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4023* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4024* Input Section:: Input section description
4025* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4026* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4027* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4028* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4029* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4030@end menu
4031
4032@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4033@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4034The full description of an output section looks like this:
4035@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4036@group
7e7d5768 4037@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4038 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4039 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4040 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4041 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4042 @{
4043 @var{output-section-command}
4044 @var{output-section-command}
4045 @dots{}
abc9061b 4046 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4047@end group
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4051
4052The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4053name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4054The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4055the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4056The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4057
4058Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4059
4060@itemize @bullet
4061@item
4062a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063@item
4064an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4065@item
4066data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4067@item
4068a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4069@end itemize
4070
4071@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4072@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4073@cindex name, section
4074@cindex section name
4075The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4076meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4077support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4078must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4079example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4080output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4081names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4082quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4083characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4084commas must be quoted.
4085
4086The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4087Discarding}.
4088
4089@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4090@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4091@cindex address, section
4092@cindex section address
4093The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4094address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4095is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4096
4097If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4098section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4099to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4100alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4101contained within the output section.
4102
4103The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4104
4105@itemize @bullet
4106@item
4107If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4108is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4109in that region.
4110
4111@item
4112If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4113regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4114section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4115be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4116
4117@item
4118If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4119the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4120counter.
4121@end itemize
4122
4123@noindent
4124For example:
4125
252b5132
RH
4126@smallexample
4127.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4128@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4129
252b5132
RH
4130@noindent
4131and
ea5cae92 4132
252b5132
RH
4133@smallexample
4134.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4135@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4136
252b5132
RH
4137@noindent
4138are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4139@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4140counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4141counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4142input sections.
252b5132
RH
4143
4144The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4145For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4146so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4147do something like this:
4148@smallexample
4149.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4150@end smallexample
4151@noindent
4152This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4153aligned upward to the specified value.
4154
4155Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4156location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4157sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4158
4159@node Input Section
36f63dca 4160@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4161@cindex input sections
4162@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4163The most common output section command is an input section description.
4164
4165The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4166You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4167in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4168map the input files into your memory layout.
4169
4170@menu
4171* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4172* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4173* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4174* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4175* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4176@end menu
4177
4178@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4179@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4180@cindex input section basics
4181An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4182by a list of section names in parentheses.
4183
4184The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4185describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4186
4187The most common input section description is to include all input
4188sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4189include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4190@smallexample
4191*(.text)
4192@end smallexample
4193@noindent
18625d54 4194Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4195@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4196of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4197match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4198example:
252b5132 4199@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4200EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4201@end smallexample
4202@noindent
4203will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4204and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4205placed inside the section list, for example:
4206@smallexample
b4346c09 4207*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4208@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4209@noindent
4210The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4211two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4212more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4213
4214There are two ways to include more than one section:
4215@smallexample
4216*(.text .rdata)
4217*(.text) *(.rdata)
4218@end smallexample
4219@noindent
4220The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4221@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4222first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4223they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4224@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4225@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4226
8f1732fc
AB
4227When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4228is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4229immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4230@smallexample
4231*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4232@end smallexample
4233@noindent
4234will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4235@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4236from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4237exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4238could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4239@smallexample
4240*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4241@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4242@noindent
4243Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4244before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4245all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4246@smallexample
4247EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4248@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4249
252b5132
RH
4250You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4251You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4252needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4253@smallexample
4254data.o(.data)
4255@end smallexample
4256
ae17ab41
CM
4257To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4258of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4259
4260Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4261
4262@smallexample
4263@group
4264SECTIONS @{
4265 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4266 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4267@}
4268@end group
4269@end smallexample
4270
4271In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4272input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4273@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4274@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4275whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4276
967928e9
AM
4277You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4278matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4279with no whitespace around the colon.
4280
4281@table @samp
4282@item archive:file
4283matches file within archive
4284@item archive:
4285matches the whole archive
4286@item :file
4287matches file but not one in an archive
4288@end table
4289
4290Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4291wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4292single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4293@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4294within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4295also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4296other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4297from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4298command.
4299
252b5132
RH
4300If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4301the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4302commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4303@smallexample
4304data.o
4305@end smallexample
4306
967928e9
AM
4307When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4308and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4309characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4310name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4311did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4312though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4313@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4314the archive search path.
4315
4316@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4317@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4318@cindex input section wildcards
4319@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4320@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4321@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4322In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4323name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4324
4325The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4326pattern for the file name.
4327
4328The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4329
4330@table @samp
4331@item *
4332matches any number of characters
4333@item ?
4334matches any single character
4335@item [@var{chars}]
4336matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4337character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4338@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4339@item \
4340quotes the following character
4341@end table
4342
4343When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4344will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4345Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4346exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4347@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4348a @samp{/} character.
4349
4350File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4351specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4352does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4353
4354If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4355appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4356will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4357sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4358@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4359@smallexample
4360.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4361.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4362@end smallexample
4363
bcaa7b3e 4364@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4365Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4366in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4367this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4368pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4369@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4370into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4371
bcaa7b3e
L
4372@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4373@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4374difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4375descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4376Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4377reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4378
02ecc8e9
L
4379@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4380@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4381difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4382ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4383encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4384
bcaa7b3e
L
4385@cindex SORT
4386@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4387
4388When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4389can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4390
4391@enumerate
4392@item
4393@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4394It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4395sections have the same name.
4396@item
4397@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4398It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4399sections have the same alignment.
4400@item
c0065db7 4401@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4402treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4403@item
4404@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4405is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4406@item
4407All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4408@end enumerate
4409
4410When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4411section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4412takes precedence over the command line option.
4413
4414If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4415command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4416treated as nested sorting command.
4417
4418@enumerate
4419@item
4420@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4421@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4422@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4423@item
4424@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4425@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4426@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4427@end enumerate
4428
4429If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4430command line option will be ignored.
4431
eda680f8
L
4432@cindex SORT_NONE
4433@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4434section sorting option.
4435
252b5132
RH
4436If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4437@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4438precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4439
4440This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4441files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4442sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4443The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4444with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4445linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4446@smallexample
4447@group
4448SECTIONS @{
4449 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4450 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4451 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4452 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4453@}
4454@end group
4455@end smallexample
4456
4457@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4458@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4459@cindex common symbol placement
4460@cindex uninitialized data placement
4461A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4462file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4463linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4464named @samp{COMMON}.
4465
4466You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4467other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4468particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4469input files are placed in another section.
4470
4471In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4472@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4473@smallexample
4474.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4475@end smallexample
4476
4477@cindex scommon section
4478@cindex small common symbols
4479Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4480example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4481symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4482different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4483the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4484symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4485to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4486locations.
4487
4488@cindex [COMMON]
4489You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4490notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4491@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4492
4493@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4494@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4495@cindex KEEP
4496@cindex garbage collection
4497When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4498it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4499This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4500with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4501@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4502
4503@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4504@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4505The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4506to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4507start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4508@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4509follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4510@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4511@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4512All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4513files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4514
4515@smallexample
4516@group
4517SECTIONS @{
4518 outputa 0x10000 :
4519 @{
4520 all.o
4521 foo.o (.input1)
4522 @}
36f63dca
NC
4523@end group
4524@group
252b5132
RH
4525 outputb :
4526 @{
4527 foo.o (.input2)
4528 foo1.o (.input1)
4529 @}
36f63dca
NC
4530@end group
4531@group
252b5132
RH
4532 outputc :
4533 @{
4534 *(.input1)
4535 *(.input2)
4536 @}
4537@}
4538@end group
a1ab1d2a 4539@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4540
4541@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4542@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4543@cindex data
4544@cindex section data
4545@cindex output section data
4546@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4547@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4548@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4549@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4550@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4551You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4552@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4553an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4554parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4555value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4556counter.
4557
4558The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4559store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4560bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4561stored.
4562
4563For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4564of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4565@smallexample
4566BYTE(1)
4567LONG(addr)
4568@end smallexample
4569
4570When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4571same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4572target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4573@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4574@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4575
4576If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4577which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4578When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4579true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4580endianness of the first input object file.
4581
36f63dca 4582Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4583between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4584@smallexample
4585SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4586@end smallexample
4587whereas this will work:
4588@smallexample
4589SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4590@end smallexample
4591
252b5132
RH
4592@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4593@cindex holes, filling
4594@cindex unspecified memory
4595You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4596current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4597otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4598gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4599with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4600necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4601point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4602than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4603different parts of an output section.
4604
4605This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4606value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4607@smallexample
563e308f 4608FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4609@end smallexample
4610
4611The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4612section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4613part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4614entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4615precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4616expression.
252b5132
RH
4617
4618@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4619@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4620There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4621commands.
4622
4623@table @code
4624@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4625@cindex input filename symbols
4626@cindex filename symbols
4627@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4628The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4629The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4630file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4631the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4632
4633This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4634normally used for any other object file format.
4635
4636@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4637@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4638@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4639@item CONSTRUCTORS
4640When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4641unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4642destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4643arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4644automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4645For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4646linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4647@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4648ignored for other object file formats.
4649
4650The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4651constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4652Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4653the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4654first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4655of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4656compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4657formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4658@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4659the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4660destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4661@code{exit}.
4662
4663For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4664arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4665addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4666and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4667linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4668runtime code expects to see.
4669
4670@smallexample
4671 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4672 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4673 *(.ctors)
4674 LONG(0)
4675 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4676 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4677 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4678 *(.dtors)
4679 LONG(0)
4680 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4681@end smallexample
4682
4683If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4684which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4685are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4686are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4687command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4688@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4689@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4690@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4691
4692Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4693and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4694need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4695scripts.
4696
4697@end table
4698
4699@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4700@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4701@cindex discarding sections
4702@cindex sections, discarding
4703@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4704The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4705This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4706may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4707@smallexample
49c13adb 4708.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4709@end smallexample
4710@noindent
4711will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4712@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4713sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4714space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4715too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4716space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4717@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4718@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4719This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4720
a0976ea4 4721The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4722on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4723symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4724the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4725section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4726
4727@cindex /DISCARD/
4728The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4729input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4730section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4731
4732@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4733@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4734@cindex output section attributes
4735We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4736like this:
0c71d759 4737
252b5132 4738@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4739@group
7e7d5768 4740@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4741 [AT(@var{lma})]
4742 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4743 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4744 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4745 @{
4746 @var{output-section-command}
4747 @var{output-section-command}
4748 @dots{}
562d3460 4749 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4750@end group
4751@end smallexample
0c71d759 4752
252b5132
RH
4753We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4754@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4755remaining section attributes.
4756
a1ab1d2a 4757@menu
252b5132
RH
4758* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4759* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4760* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4761* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4762* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4763* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4764* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4765* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4766@end menu
4767
4768@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4769@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4770Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4771parentheses. The following types are defined:
4772
4773@table @code
4774@item NOLOAD
4775The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4776loaded into memory when the program is run.
4777@item DSECT
4778@itemx COPY
4779@itemx INFO
4780@itemx OVERLAY
4781These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4782rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4783marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4784section when the program is run.
4785@end table
4786
4787@kindex NOLOAD
4788@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4789@cindex loading, preventing
4790The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4791the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4792the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4793@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4794need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4795@smallexample
4796@group
4797SECTIONS @{
4798 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4799 @dots{}
4800@}
4801@end group
4802@end smallexample
4803
4804@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4805@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4806@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4807@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4808@cindex load address
4809@cindex section load address
4810Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4811@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4812@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4813specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4814address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4815
ea5cae92
NC
4816The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4817specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4818takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4819load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4820region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4821
4822If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4823section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4824load address:
4825
4826@itemize @bullet
4827@item
4828If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4829the LMA address as well.
4830
4831@item
4832If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4833
4834@item
4835Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4836with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4837section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4838VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4839the last section in the located region.
4840
4841@item
4842If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4843that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4844
4845@item
4846If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4847section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4848@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4849
4850@cindex ROM initialized data
4851@cindex initialized data in ROM
4852This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4853example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4854called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4855@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4856even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4857uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4858defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4859counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4860
4861@smallexample
4862@group
4863SECTIONS
4864 @{
4865 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4866 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4867 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4868 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4869 .bss 0x3000 :
4870 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4871@}
4872@end group
4873@end smallexample
4874
4875The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4876this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4877the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4878how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4879script.
4880
4881@smallexample
4882@group
4883extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4884char *src = &_etext;
4885char *dst = &_data;
4886
ea5cae92
NC
4887/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4888while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4889 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4890
ea5cae92 4891/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4892for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4893 *dst = 0;
4894@end group
4895@end smallexample
4896
bbf115d3
L
4897@node Forced Output Alignment
4898@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4899@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4900@cindex forcing output section alignment
4901@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4902You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4903alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4904intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4905
7e7d5768
AM
4906@node Forced Input Alignment
4907@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4908@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4909@cindex forcing input section alignment
4910@cindex input section alignment
4911You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4912SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4913sections, whether larger or smaller.
4914
0c71d759
NC
4915@node Output Section Constraint
4916@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4917@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4918@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4919@cindex constraints on output sections
4920You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4921of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4922read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4923@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4924
252b5132 4925@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4926@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4927@kindex >@var{region}
4928@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4929@cindex memory regions and sections
4930You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4931using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4932
4933Here is a simple example:
4934@smallexample
4935@group
4936MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4937SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4938@end group
4939@end smallexample
4940
4941@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4942@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4943@kindex :@var{phdr}
4944@cindex section, assigning to program header
4945@cindex program headers and sections
4946You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4947using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4948one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4949assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4950@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4951linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4952
4953Here is a simple example:
4954@smallexample
4955@group
4956PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4957SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4958@end group
4959@end smallexample
4960
4961@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4962@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4963@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4964@cindex section fill pattern
4965@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4966You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4967@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4968(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4969within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4970alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4971necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4972of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4973an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4974fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4975other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4976pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4977expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4978
4979You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4980output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4981
4982Here is a simple example:
4983@smallexample
4984@group
563e308f 4985SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4986@end group
4987@end smallexample
4988
4989@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4990@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4991@kindex OVERLAY
4992@cindex overlays
4993An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4994are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4995the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4996copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4997required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4998can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4999than another.
5000
5001Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5002@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5003output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5004command is as follows:
5005@smallexample
5006@group
5007OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5008 @{
5009 @var{secname1}
5010 @{
5011 @var{output-section-command}
5012 @var{output-section-command}
5013 @dots{}
5014 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5015 @var{secname2}
5016 @{
5017 @var{output-section-command}
5018 @var{output-section-command}
5019 @dots{}
5020 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5021 @dots{}
abc9061b 5022 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5023@end group
5024@end smallexample
5025
5026Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5027section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5028section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5029those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5030except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5031sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5032
abc9061b
CC
5033The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5034the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5035
252b5132
RH
5036The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5037addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5038memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5039whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5040and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5041and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5042
56dd11f0
NC
5043If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5044references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5045the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5046sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5047@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5048
5049For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5050provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5051defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5052@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5053the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5054within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5055symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5056
5057At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5058the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5059
5060Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5061@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5062@smallexample
5063@group
5064 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5065 @{
5066 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5067 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5068 @}
5069@end group
5070@end smallexample
5071@noindent
5072This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5073address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5074@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5075following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5076@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5077@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5078
5079C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5080like the following.
5081
5082@smallexample
5083@group
5084 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5085 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5086 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5087@end group
5088@end smallexample
5089
5090Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5091everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5092example could have been written identically as follows.
5093
5094@smallexample
5095@group
5096 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5097 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5098 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5099 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5100 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5101 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5102 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5103@end group
5104@end smallexample
5105
5106@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5107@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5108@kindex MEMORY
5109@cindex memory regions
5110@cindex regions of memory
5111@cindex allocating memory
5112@cindex discontinuous memory
5113The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5114memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5115
5116The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5117memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5118may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5119can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5120set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5121regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5122around to fit into the available regions.
5123
127fcdff
AB
5124A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5125however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5126specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5127@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5128@smallexample
5129@group
a1ab1d2a 5130MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5131 @{
5132 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5133 @dots{}
5134 @}
5135@end group
5136@end smallexample
5137
5138The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5139region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5140Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5141with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5142must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5143add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5144command.
252b5132
RH
5145
5146@cindex memory region attributes
5147The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5148whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5149not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5150@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5151section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5152the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5153them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5154
5155The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5156@table @samp
5157@item R
5158Read-only section
5159@item W
5160Read/write section
5161@item X
5162Executable section
5163@item A
5164Allocatable section
5165@item I
5166Initialized section
5167@item L
5168Same as @samp{I}
5169@item !
c09e9a8c 5170Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5171@end table
5172
5173If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5174@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5175attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5176in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5177attributes.
5178
5179@kindex ORIGIN =
5180@kindex o =
5181@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5182The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5183the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5184cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5185abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5186@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5187
5188@kindex LENGTH =
5189@kindex len =
5190@kindex l =
5191The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5192region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5193be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5194@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5195
5196In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5197available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5198and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5199linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5200is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5201or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5202explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5203region.
5204
5205@smallexample
5206@group
a1ab1d2a 5207MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5208 @{
5209 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5210 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5211 @}
5212@end group
5213@end smallexample
5214
5215Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5216specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5217@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5218a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5219output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5220was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5221the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5222output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5223region, the linker will issue an error message.
5224
3ec57632 5225It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5226expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5227@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5228
5229@smallexample
5230@group
c0065db7 5231 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5232@end group
5233@end smallexample
5234
252b5132
RH
5235@node PHDRS
5236@section PHDRS Command
5237@kindex PHDRS
5238@cindex program headers
5239@cindex ELF program headers
5240@cindex program segments
5241@cindex segments, ELF
5242The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5243@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5244loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5245program with the @samp{-p} option.
5246
5247When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5248reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5249program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5250This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5251interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5252
5253The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5254in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5255precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5256the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5257not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5258
5259The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5260generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5261ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5262
5263This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5264@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5265
5266@smallexample
5267@group
5268PHDRS
5269@{
5270 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5271 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5272@}
5273@end group
5274@end smallexample
5275
5276The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5277of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5278header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5279with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5280must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5281is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5282
5283Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5284system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5285specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5286sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5287attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5288Section Phdr}.
5289
5290It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5291merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5292repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5293contain the section.
5294
5295If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5296then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5297not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5298convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5299placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5300default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5301segment at all.
5302
5303@kindex FILEHDR
5304@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5305You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5306the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5307The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5308file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5309include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5310segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5311these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5312
5313The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5314value of the keyword.
5315
5316@table @asis
5317@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5318Indicates an unused program header.
5319
5320@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5321Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5322the file.
5323
5324@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5325Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5326
5327@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5328Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5329found.
5330
5331@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5332Indicates a segment holding note information.
5333
5334@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5335A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5336ABI.
5337
5338@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5339Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5340
5341@item @var{expression}
5342An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5343be used for types not defined above.
5344@end table
5345
5346You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5347in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5348@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5349Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5350output section attribute.
5351
5352The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5353which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5354explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5355an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5356header.
5357
5358Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5359headers used on a native ELF system.
5360
5361@example
5362@group
5363PHDRS
5364@{
5365 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5366 interp PT_INTERP ;
5367 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5368 data PT_LOAD ;
5369 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5370@}
5371
5372SECTIONS
5373@{
5374 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5375 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5376 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5377 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5378 @dots{}
5379 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5380 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5381 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5382 @dots{}
5383@}
5384@end group
5385@end example
5386
5387@node VERSION
5388@section VERSION Command
5389@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5390@cindex symbol versions
5391@cindex version script
5392@cindex versions of symbols
5393The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5394only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5395symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5396a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5397shared library.
5398
5399You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5400you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5401also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5402
5403The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5404@smallexample
5405VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5406@end smallexample
5407
5408The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5409Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5410version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5411version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5412version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5413scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5414library.
5415
5416The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5417examples.
5418
5419@smallexample
5420VERS_1.1 @{
5421 global:
5422 foo1;
5423 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5424 old*;
5425 original*;
5426 new*;
252b5132
RH
5427@};
5428
5429VERS_1.2 @{
5430 foo2;
5431@} VERS_1.1;
5432
5433VERS_2.0 @{
5434 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5435 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5436 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5437 "f(int, double)";
5438 @};
252b5132
RH
5439@} VERS_1.2;
5440@end smallexample
5441
5442This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5443version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5444The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5445a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5446of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5447symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5448is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5449in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5450However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5451name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5452
5453Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5454depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5455to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5456
5457Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5458depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5459and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5460
5461When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5462specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5463unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5464unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5465somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5466wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5467wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5468set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5469ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5470
5471The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5472they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5473could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5474However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5475
0f6bf451 5476Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5477in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5478symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5479won't.
5480
5481@smallexample
7c9c73be 5482@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5483@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5484
252b5132
RH
5485When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5486symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5487requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5488shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5489loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5490linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5491application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5492way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5493all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5494search for each symbol reference.
5495
5496The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5497doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5498that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5499functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5500the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5501required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5502that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5503versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5504the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5505
5506There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5507first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5508source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5509script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5510maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5511@smallexample
5512__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5513@end smallexample
5514@noindent
5515in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5516be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5517The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5518@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5519takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5520
5521The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5522function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5523an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5524version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5525linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5526
5527To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5528source file. Here is an example:
5529
5530@smallexample
5531__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5532__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5533__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5534__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5538unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5539example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5540@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5541
5542When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5543some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5544this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5545@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5546declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5547you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5548
5549If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5550within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5551(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5552specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5553
cb840a31
L
5554You can also specify the language in the version script:
5555
5556@smallexample
5557VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5558@end smallexample
5559
c0065db7 5560The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5561The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5562demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5563patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5564@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5565
86043bbb
MM
5566Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5567described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5568or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5569the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5570whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5571cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5572might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5573should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5574expect when you upgrade.
5575
252b5132
RH
5576@node Expressions
5577@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5578@cindex expressions
5579@cindex arithmetic
5580The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5581that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5582expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5583host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5584
5585You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5586
5587The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5588expressions.
5589
5590@menu
5591* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5592* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5593* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5594* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5595* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5596* Operators:: Operators
5597* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5598* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5599* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5600@end menu
5601
5602@node Constants
5603@subsection Constants
5604@cindex integer notation
5605@cindex constants in linker scripts
5606All constants are integers.
5607
5608As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5609octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5610hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5611@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5612@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5613value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5614
5615@cindex scaled integers
5616@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5617@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5618@cindex suffixes for integers
5619@cindex integer suffixes
5620In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5621constant by
5622@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5623@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5624@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5625@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5626@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5627@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5628@tex
5629${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5630@end tex
5631@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5632respectively. For example, the following
5633all refer to the same quantity:
5634
252b5132 5635@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5636_fourk_1 = 4K;
5637_fourk_2 = 4096;
5638_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5639_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5640@end smallexample
5641
8a308ae8
NC
5642Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5643conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5644
0c71d759
NC
5645@node Symbolic Constants
5646@subsection Symbolic Constants
5647@cindex symbolic constants
5648@kindex CONSTANT
5649It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5650the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5651
5652@table @code
5653@item MAXPAGESIZE
5654@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5655The target's maximum page size.
5656
5657@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5658@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5659The target's default page size.
5660@end table
5661
5662So for example:
5663
5664@smallexample
9d5777a3 5665 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5666@end smallexample
5667
5668will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5669supported by the target.
5670
252b5132
RH
5671@node Symbols
5672@subsection Symbol Names
5673@cindex symbol names
5674@cindex names
5675@cindex quoted symbol names
5676@kindex "
5677Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5678and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5679Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5680specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5681keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5682@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5683"SECTION" = 9;
5684"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5685@end smallexample
5686
5687Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5688to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5689whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5690
ecca9871
L
5691@node Orphan Sections
5692@subsection Orphan Sections
5693@cindex orphan
5694Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5695are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5696script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5697output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5698placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5699attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5700same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5701If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5702at the end of the file.
5703
5704For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5705well as section flag.
5706
c005eb9e
AB
5707The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5708(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5709output sections an orphan is placed in.
5710
41911f68 5711If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5712the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5713__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5714section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5715orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5716representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5717character.
5718
252b5132
RH
5719@node Location Counter
5720@subsection The Location Counter
5721@kindex .
5722@cindex dot
5723@cindex location counter
5724@cindex current output location
5725The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5726current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5727location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5728within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5729anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5730
5731@cindex holes
5732Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5733moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5734location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5735and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5736doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5737
5738@smallexample
5739SECTIONS
5740@{
5741 output :
5742 @{
5743 file1(.text)
5744 . = . + 1000;
5745 file2(.text)
5746 . += 1000;
5747 file3(.text)
563e308f 5748 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5749@}
5750@end smallexample
5751@noindent
5752In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5753located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5754followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5755@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5756@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5757specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5758
5c6bbab8
NC
5759@cindex dot inside sections
5760Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5761current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5762statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5763absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5764however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5765not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5766
5767@smallexample
5768SECTIONS
5769@{
5770 . = 0x100
5771 .text: @{
5772 *(.text)
5773 . = 0x200
5774 @}
5775 . = 0x500
5776 .data: @{
5777 *(.data)
5778 . += 0x600
5779 @}
5780@}
5781@end smallexample
5782
5783The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5784and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5785the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5786much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5787move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5788and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5789the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5790the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5791
b5666f2f
AM
5792@cindex dot outside sections
5793Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5794output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5795needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5796
5797@smallexample
5798SECTIONS
5799@{
5800 start_of_text = . ;
5801 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5802 end_of_text = . ;
5803
5804 start_of_data = . ;
5805 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5806 end_of_data = . ;
5807@}
5808@end smallexample
5809
5810If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5811not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5812between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5813should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5814blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5815the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5816sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5817statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5818special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5819place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5820as follows:
5821
5822@smallexample
5823SECTIONS
5824@{
5825 start_of_text = . ;
5826 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5827 end_of_text = . ;
5828
5829 start_of_data = . ;
5830 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5831 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5832 end_of_data = . ;
5833@}
5834@end smallexample
5835
5836This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5837@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5838placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5839assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5840a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5841section. So you could write:
5842
5843@smallexample
5844SECTIONS
5845@{
5846 start_of_text = . ;
5847 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5848 end_of_text = . ;
5849
5850 . = . ;
5851 start_of_data = . ;
5852 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5853 end_of_data = . ;
5854@}
5855@end smallexample
5856
5857Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5858@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5859
252b5132
RH
5860@need 2000
5861@node Operators
5862@subsection Operators
5863@cindex operators for arithmetic
5864@cindex arithmetic operators
5865@cindex precedence in expressions
5866The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5867the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5868@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5869@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5870@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5871@smallexample
5872precedence associativity Operators Notes
5873(highest)
58741 left ! - ~ (1)
58752 left * / %
58763 left + -
58774 left >> <<
58785 left == != > < <= >=
58796 left &
58807 left |
58818 left &&
58829 left ||
588310 right ? :
588411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5885(lowest)
5886@end smallexample
5887Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5888(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5889(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5890@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5891@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5892@tex
5893\vskip \baselineskip
5894%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5895\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5896\hrule
5897\halign
5898{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5899height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5900&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5901height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5902\noalign{\hrule}
5903height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5904&highest&&&&&\cr
5905% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5906&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5907&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5908&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5909&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5910&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5911&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5912&7&&left&&|&\cr
5913&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5914&9&&left&&||&\cr
5915&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5916&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5917&lowest&&&&&\cr
5918height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5919\hrule}
5920@end tex
5921@iftex
5922{
5923@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5924@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5925@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5926}
5927@end iftex
5928@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5929
5930@node Evaluation
5931@subsection Evaluation
5932@cindex lazy evaluation
5933@cindex expression evaluation order
5934The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5935an expression when absolutely necessary.
5936
5937The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5938address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5939regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5940as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5941
5942However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5943until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5944other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5945for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5946
5947The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5948assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5949allocation.
5950
5951Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5952@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5953
5954If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5955available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5956following
5957@smallexample
5958@group
5959SECTIONS
5960 @{
a1ab1d2a 5961 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5962 @{ *(.text) @}
5963 @}
5964@end group
5965@end smallexample
5966@noindent
5967will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5968address}.
5969
5970@node Expression Section
5971@subsection The Section of an Expression
5972@cindex expression sections
5973@cindex absolute expressions
5974@cindex relative expressions
5975@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5976@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5977@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5978Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5979relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5980using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5981value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5982symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5983operations.
5984
abf4be64
AM
5985Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5986section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5987address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5988@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5989functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5990One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5991(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5992differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5993versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5994section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5995Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5996absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5997given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5998everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5999
6000In the following simple example,
252b5132 6001
7542af2a
AM
6002@smallexample
6003@group
6004SECTIONS
6005 @{
6006 . = 0x100;
6007 __executable_start = 0x100;
6008 .data :
6009 @{
6010 . = 0x10;
6011 __data_start = 0x10;
6012 *(.data)
6013 @}
6014 @dots{}
6015 @}
6016@end group
6017@end smallexample
252b5132 6018
7542af2a
AM
6019both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6020address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6021@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6022section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6023
5c3049d2
AM
6024For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6025addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6026
6027@itemize @bullet
6028@item
c05f749e
AM
6029Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6030operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6031absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6032@item
7542af2a
AM
6033Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6034relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6035and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6036@item
c05f749e
AM
6037Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6038in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6039address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6040before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6041@end itemize
6042
6043The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6044
6045@itemize @bullet
6046@item
6047An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6048@item
6049The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6050@item
9bc8bb33 6051The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6052relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6053(after above conversions) is also a number when
6054@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6055but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6056@item
6057The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6058relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6059section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6060@item
6061The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6062conversions) is an absolute address.
6063@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6064
6065You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6066to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6067create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6068section @samp{.data}:
6069@smallexample
6070SECTIONS
6071 @{
6072 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6073 @}
6074@end smallexample
6075@noindent
6076If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6077@samp{.data} section.
6078
7542af2a
AM
6079Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6080particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6081
252b5132
RH
6082@node Builtin Functions
6083@subsection Builtin Functions
6084@cindex functions in expressions
6085The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6086use in linker script expressions.
6087
6088@table @code
6089@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6090@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6091@cindex expression, absolute
6092Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6093of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6094value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6095normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6096
6097@item ADDR(@var{section})
6098@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6099@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6100Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6101script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6102the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6103@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6104@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6105the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6106@smallexample
6107@group
6108SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6109 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6110 @{
252b5132
RH
6111 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6112 @dots{}
6113 @}
6114 .output :
6115 @{
6116 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6117 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6118 @}
6119@dots{} @}
6120@end group
6121@end smallexample
6122
876f4090
NS
6123@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6124@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6125@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6126@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6127@cindex round up location counter
6128@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6129@cindex round up expression
6130@cindex align expression
6131Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6132to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6133doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6134arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6135expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6136equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6137
6138Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6139next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6140variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6141input sections:
252b5132
RH
6142@smallexample
6143@group
6144SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6145 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6146 *(.data)
6147 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6148 @}
6149@dots{} @}
6150@end group
6151@end smallexample
6152@noindent
6153The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6154a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6155a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6156of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6157
6158The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6159
362c1d1a
NS
6160@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6161@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6162@cindex section alignment
6163Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6164been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6165evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6166the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6167value in that section.
6168@smallexample
6169@group
6170SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6171 .output @{
6172 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6173 @dots{}
6174 @}
6175@dots{} @}
6176@end group
6177@end smallexample
6178
252b5132
RH
6179@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6180@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6181This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6182scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6183section.
6184
2d20f7bf
JJ
6185@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6186@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6187This is equivalent to either
6188@smallexample
6189(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6190@end smallexample
6191or
6192@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6193(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6194 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6195@end smallexample
6196@noindent
6197depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6198for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6199@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6200If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6201memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6202bytes in the on-disk file.
6203
6204This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6205any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6206@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6207be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6208working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6209
6210@noindent
6211Example:
6212@smallexample
6213 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6214@end smallexample
6215
6216@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6217@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6218This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6219evaluation purposes.
6220
6221@smallexample
6222 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6223@end smallexample
6224
a4f5ad88
JJ
6225@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6226@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6227This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6228@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6229When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6230does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6231@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6232boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6233it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6234@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6235padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6236section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6237
6238@smallexample
6239 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6240@end smallexample
6241
252b5132
RH
6242@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6243@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6244@cindex symbol defaults
6245Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6246defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6247return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6248default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6249shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6250the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6251existed, its value is preserved:
6252
6253@smallexample
6254@group
6255SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .text : @{
6257 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6258 @dots{}
6259 @}
6260 @dots{}
6261@}
6262@end group
6263@end smallexample
6264
3ec57632
NC
6265@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6266@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6267Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6268
252b5132
RH
6269@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6270@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6271@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6272Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6273Section LMA}).
6274
2e53f7d6
NC
6275@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6276@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6277Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6278@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6279
252b5132
RH
6280@kindex MAX
6281@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6282Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6283
6284@kindex MIN
6285@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6286Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6287
6288@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6289@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6290@cindex unallocated address, next
6291Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6292This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6293use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6294output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6295
3ec57632
NC
6296@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6297@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6298Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6299
ba916c8a
MM
6300@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6301@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6302Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6303value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6304@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6305will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6306can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6307``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6308name.
6309
252b5132
RH
6310@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6311@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6312@cindex section size
6313Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6314been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6315evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6316@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6317@smallexample
6318@group
6319SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6320 .output @{
6321 .start = . ;
6322 @dots{}
6323 .end = . ;
6324 @}
6325 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6326 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6327@dots{} @}
6328@end group
6329@end smallexample
6330
6331@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6332@itemx sizeof_headers
6333@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6334@cindex header size
6335Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6336information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6337this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6338choose, to facilitate paging.
6339
6340@cindex not enough room for program headers
6341@cindex program headers, not enough room
6342When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6343@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6344number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6345addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6346additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6347room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6348the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6349script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6350you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6351command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6352@end table
6353
6354@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6355@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6356@cindex implicit linker scripts
6357If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6358an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6359linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6360linker will report an error.
6361
6362An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6363
6364Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6365assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6366commands.
6367
6368Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6369at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6370read. This can affect archive searching.
6371
6372@ifset GENERIC
6373@node Machine Dependent
6374@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6375
6376@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6377@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6378sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6379functionality are not listed.
6380
6381@menu
36f63dca
NC
6382@ifset H8300
6383* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6384@end ifset
6385@ifset I960
6386* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6387@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6388@ifset M68HC11
6389* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6390@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6391@ifset ARM
6392* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6393@end ifset
6394@ifset HPPA
6395* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6396@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6397@ifset M68K
6398* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6399@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6400@ifset MIPS
6401* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6402@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6403@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6404* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6405@end ifset
2469cfa2 6406@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6407* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6408@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6409@ifset NDS32
6410* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6411@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6412@ifset NIOSII
6413* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6414@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6415@ifset POWERPC
6416* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6417@end ifset
6418@ifset POWERPC64
6419* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6420@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6421@ifset SPU
6422* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6423@end ifset
74459f0e 6424@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6425* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6426@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6427@ifset WIN32
6428* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6429@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6430@ifset XTENSA
6431* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6432@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6433@end menu
6434@end ifset
6435
252b5132
RH
6436@ifset H8300
6437@ifclear GENERIC
6438@raisesections
6439@end ifclear
6440
6441@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6442@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6443
6444@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6445For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6446you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6447
6448@table @emph
6449@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6450@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6451@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6452targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6453program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6454respectively.
6455
6456@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6457@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6458@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6459@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6460sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6461page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6462(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6463@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6464top page of memory).
1502569c 6465
81f5558e
NC
6466@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6467indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6468displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6469the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6470@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6471whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6472range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6473
1502569c 6474@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6475@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6476biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6477which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6478page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6479(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6480@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6481the top page of memory).
6482
6483@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6484@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
648532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6486changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6487(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6488@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6489the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6490@end table
6491
6492@ifclear GENERIC
6493@lowersections
6494@end ifclear
6495@end ifset
6496
36f63dca 6497@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6498@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6499@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6500@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6501@node Renesas
6502@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6503
c2dcd04e
NC
6504@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6505H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6506options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6507@end ifset
6508@end ifclear
6509
6510@ifset I960
6511@ifclear GENERIC
6512@raisesections
6513@end ifclear
6514
6515@node i960
6516@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6517
6518@cindex i960 support
6519
6520You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6521specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6522family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6523incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6524linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6525libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6526search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6527
6528For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6529well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6530paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6531the names
6532
6533@smallexample
6534@group
6535try
6536libtry.a
6537tryca
6538libtryca.a
6539@end group
6540@end smallexample
6541
6542@noindent
6543The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6544two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6545
6546You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6547the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6548use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6549specifies a library.
6550
6551@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6552@cindex relaxing on i960
6553@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6554you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6555@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6556them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6557instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6558instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6559target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6560not itself call any subroutines).
6561
6562@ifclear GENERIC
6563@lowersections
6564@end ifclear
6565@end ifset
6566
6567@ifset ARM
6568@ifclear GENERIC
6569@raisesections
6570@end ifclear
6571
93fd0973
SC
6572@ifset M68HC11
6573@ifclear GENERIC
6574@raisesections
6575@end ifclear
6576
6577@node M68HC11/68HC12
6578@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6579
6580@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6581
6582@subsection Linker Relaxation
6583
6584For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6585optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6586
6587@table @emph
6588@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6589@item relaxing address modes
6590@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6591targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6592program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6593respectively.
6594
6595@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6596transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6597page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6598
6599@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6600When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6601of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6602addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6603@code{bset} instructions.
6604
6605@end table
6606
6607@subsection Trampoline Generation
6608
6609@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6610@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6611For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6612call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6613will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6614trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6615case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6616point to the function trampoline.
6617
6618@ifclear GENERIC
6619@lowersections
6620@end ifclear
6621@end ifset
6622
36f63dca 6623@node ARM
3674e28a 6624@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6625
6626@cindex ARM interworking support
6627@kindex --support-old-code
6628For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6629between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6630been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6631line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6632libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6633option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6634given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6635which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6636the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6637non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6638
6639@cindex thumb entry point
6640@cindex entry point, thumb
6641@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6642The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6643@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6644But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6645branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6646executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6647
ce11ba6c
KT
6648@cindex PE import table prefixing
6649@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6650The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6651the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6652element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6653import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6654
e489d0ae
PB
6655@cindex BE8
6656@kindex --be8
6657The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6658executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6659objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6660option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6661little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6662
3674e28a
PB
6663@cindex TARGET1
6664@kindex --target1-rel
6665@kindex --target1-abs
6666The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6667@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6668or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6669and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6670
6671@cindex TARGET2
6672@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6673The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6674@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6675meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6676@table @samp
6677@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6678@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6679@item abs
6680@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6681@item got-rel
6682@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6683@end table
6684
319850b4
JB
6685@cindex FIX_V4BX
6686@kindex --fix-v4bx
6687The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6688specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6689interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6690also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6691
6692In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6693linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6694@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6695
6696In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6697relocations are ignored.
6698
845b51d6
PB
6699@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6700@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6701Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6702relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6703
6704@smallexample
6705TST rM, #1
6706MOVEQ PC, rM
6707BX Rn
6708@end smallexample
6709
6710This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6711and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6712condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6713
33bfe774
JB
6714@cindex USE_BLX
6715@kindex --use-blx
6716The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6717BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6718situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6719code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6720each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6721
6722This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6723specify it if you are using that target.
6724
c6dd86c6
JB
6725@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6726@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6727The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6728bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6729instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6730to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6731the support code can read the intended values.
6732
6733The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6734intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6735and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6736intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6737full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6738you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6739
6740If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6741enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6742@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6743mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6744vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6745@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6746
6747If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6748potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6749such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6750first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6751instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6752the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6753are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6754
2de70689
MGD
6755@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6756@kindex --fix-arm1176
6757@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6758The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6759in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6760are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6761unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6762
9d5777a3 6763Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6764Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6765http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6766
a504d23a
LA
6767@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6768@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6769
6770The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6771workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6772the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6773off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6774the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6775core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6776integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6777VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6778
6779The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6780necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6781
6782The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6783@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6784STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6785linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6786@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6787
6788If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6789potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6790such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6791replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6792branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6793then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6794
6795The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6796the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6797
6798The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6799they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6800there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6801occurs.
6802
6803The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6804PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6805large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6806cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6807occurs.
6808
bf21ed78
MS
6809@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6810@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6811The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6812warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6813enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6814linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6815using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6816not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6817
6818@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6819@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6820The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6821warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6822@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6823linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6824using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6825
726150b7
NC
6826@cindex PIC_VENEER
6827@kindex --pic-veneer
6828The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6829ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6830is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6831@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6832
6833@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6834@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6835The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6836code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6837perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6838placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6839controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6840The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6841duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6842group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6843code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6844where they should be placed.
6845
6846The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6847@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6848placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6849branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6850placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6851value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6852exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6853A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6854linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6855from the input sections.
6856
6857The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6858@samp{N = +1}.
6859
1a51c1a4
NC
6860Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6861only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6862otherwise.
6863
1db37fe6
YG
6864@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6865@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6866@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6867The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6868
6869The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6870
68fcca92
JW
6871@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6872@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6873@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6874The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6875
6876Please contact ARM for further details.
6877
1db37fe6
YG
6878@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6879@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6880@cindex Merging exidx entries
6881The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6882
6883@kindex --long-plt
6884@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6885The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6886which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6887entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6888
1f56df9d
JW
6889@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6890@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6891The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6892link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6893
4ba2ef8f
TP
6894@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6895All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6896Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6897@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6898veneers in memory.
6899
54ddd295
TP
6900@kindex --cmse-implib
6901@cindex Secure gateway import library
6902The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6903specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6904secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6905executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6906
0955507f
TP
6907@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6908@cindex Input import library
6909The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6910must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6911given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6912in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6913@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6914library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6915library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6916for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6917specified.
6918
36f63dca
NC
6919@ifclear GENERIC
6920@lowersections
6921@end ifclear
6922@end ifset
6923
6924@ifset HPPA
6925@ifclear GENERIC
6926@raisesections
6927@end ifclear
6928
6929@node HPPA ELF32
6930@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6931@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6932@kindex --multi-subspace
6933When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6934import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6935The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6936stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6937multiple sub-spaces.
6938
6939@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6940@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6941Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6942stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6943@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6944sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6945a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6946the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6947conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6948prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6949A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6950branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6951@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6952@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6953detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6954positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6955
6956Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6957single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6958create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6959large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6960
6961@ifclear GENERIC
6962@lowersections
6963@end ifclear
6964@end ifset
6965
7fb9f789
NC
6966@ifset M68K
6967@ifclear GENERIC
6968@raisesections
6969@end ifclear
6970
6971@node M68K
6972@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6973
6974@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6975@kindex --got=@var{type}
6976The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6977The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6978@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6979the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6980@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6981entries only at non-negative offsets.
6982@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6983entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6984support such GOTs.
6985@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6986output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6987file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6988files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6989
6990@ifclear GENERIC
6991@lowersections
6992@end ifclear
6993@end ifset
6994
833794fc
MR
6995@ifset MIPS
6996@ifclear GENERIC
6997@raisesections
6998@end ifclear
6999
7000@node MIPS
7001@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7002
7003@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7004@kindex --insn32
7005@kindex --no-insn32
7006The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7007microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7008in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7009used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7010or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7011including 16-bit ones where possible.
7012
7013@ifclear GENERIC
7014@lowersections
7015@end ifclear
7016@end ifset
7017
36f63dca
NC
7018@ifset MMIX
7019@ifclear GENERIC
7020@raisesections
7021@end ifclear
7022
7023@node MMIX
7024@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7025For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7026@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7027understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7028can translate between the two formats.
7029
7030There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7031Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7032registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7033equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7034@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7035global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7036this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7037symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7038
7a2de473
HPN
7039Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7040@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7041The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7042of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7043
7044Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7045are left out from an mmo file.
7046
7047@ifclear GENERIC
7048@lowersections
7049@end ifclear
7050@end ifset
7051
7052@ifset MSP430
7053@ifclear GENERIC
7054@raisesections
7055@end ifclear
7056
7057@node MSP430
7058@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7059For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7060will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7061just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7062
7063@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7064The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7065
7066@table @code
7067@item @samp{.vectors}
7068Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7069
7070@item @samp{.bootloader}
7071Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7072in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7073
7074@item @samp{.infomem}
7075Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7076this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7077
c0065db7 7078@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7079This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7080in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7081
7082@item @samp{.noinit}
7083Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7084
c0065db7 7085The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7086@end table
7087
7088@ifclear GENERIC
7089@lowersections
7090@end ifclear
7091@end ifset
7092
35c08157
KLC
7093@ifset NDS32
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@raisesections
7096@end ifclear
7097
7098@node NDS32
7099@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7100@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7101For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7102relaxes objects according to these options.
7103
7104@table @code
7105@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7106Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7107
7108@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7109Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7110
7111@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7112Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7113
7114@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7115Export the EX9 table after linking.
7116
7117@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7118Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7119
7120@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7121Update the existing EX9 table.
7122
7123@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7124Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7125
7126@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7127Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7128
7129@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7130Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7131
7132@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7133Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7134@end table
7135
7136@ifclear GENERIC
7137@lowersections
7138@end ifclear
7139@end ifset
7140
78058a5e
SL
7141@ifset NIOSII
7142@ifclear GENERIC
7143@raisesections
7144@end ifclear
7145
7146@node Nios II
7147@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7148@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7149@kindex --relax on Nios II
7150
7151Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7152transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7153which may result in @command{ld} giving
7154@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7155The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7156trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7157outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7158trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7159be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7160larger than 256MB.
7161
7162The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7163is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7164@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7165locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7166source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7167register as a temporary.
7168
7169Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7170relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7171option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7172
7173@ifclear GENERIC
7174@lowersections
7175@end ifclear
7176@end ifset
7177
2a60a7a8
AM
7178@ifset POWERPC
7179@ifclear GENERIC
7180@raisesections
7181@end ifclear
7182
7183@node PowerPC ELF32
7184@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7185@cindex PowerPC long branches
7186@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7187Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7188displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7189@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7190@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7191the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7192section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7193section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7194@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7195both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7196considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7197
7198@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7199@table @option
7200@cindex PowerPC PLT
7201@kindex --bss-plt
7202@item --bss-plt
7203Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7204generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7205the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7206writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7207@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7208PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7209compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7210BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7211
016687f8
AM
7212@kindex --secure-plt
7213@item --secure-plt
7214@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7215@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7216when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7217layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7218style BSS PLT.
7219
2a60a7a8
AM
7220@cindex PowerPC GOT
7221@kindex --sdata-got
7222@item --sdata-got
7223The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7224sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7225@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7226section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7227@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7228@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7229@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7230@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7231PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7232pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7233GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7234really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7235
7236@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7237@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7238@item --emit-stub-syms
7239This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7240symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7241
7242@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7243@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7244@item --no-tls-optimize
7245PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7246sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7247disable the optimization.
7248@end table
7249
7250@ifclear GENERIC
7251@lowersections
7252@end ifclear
7253@end ifset
7254
7255@ifset POWERPC64
7256@ifclear GENERIC
7257@raisesections
7258@end ifclear
7259
7260@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7261@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7262
7263@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7264@table @option
7265@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7266@kindex --stub-group-size
7267@item --stub-group-size
7268Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7269by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7270@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7271sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7272a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7273the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7274conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7275prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7276A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7277branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7278@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7279@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7280detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7281positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7282
7283Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7284single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7285create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7286large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7287
7288@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7289@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7290@item --emit-stub-syms
7291This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7292symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7293
7294@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7295@kindex --dotsyms
7296@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7297@item --dotsyms
7298@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7299These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7300in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7301function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7302code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7303properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7304to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7305@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7306dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7307feature.
7308
7ae4ea7d
AM
7309@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7310@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7311@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7312@item --save-restore-funcs
7313@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7314These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7315provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7316@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7317function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7318link.
7319
2a60a7a8
AM
7320@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7321@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7322@item --no-tls-optimize
7323PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7324sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7325disable the optimization.
7326
7c9cf415
AM
7327@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7328@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7329@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7330@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7331@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7332These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7333stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7334an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7335@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7336stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7337option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7338Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7339slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7340application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7341normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7342
2a60a7a8
AM
7343@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7344@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7345@item --no-opd-optimize
7346PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7347corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7348the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7349Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7350
7351@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7352@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7353@item --non-overlapping-opd
7354Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7355@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7356the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7357entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7358
7359@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7360@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7361@item --no-toc-optimize
7362PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7363entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7364reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7365marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7366marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7367relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7368unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7369reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7370discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7371reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7372code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7373optimization.
7374
7375@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7376@kindex --no-multi-toc
7377@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7378If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7379@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7380where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7381entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7382total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7383grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7384TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7385calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7386help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
738764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7388Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7389
7390@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7391@kindex --no-toc-sort
7392@item --no-toc-sort
7393By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7394happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7395placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7396with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7397referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7398@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7399results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7400off this feature.
7401
7402@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7403@kindex --plt-align
7404@kindex --no-plt-align
7405@item --plt-align
7406@itemx --no-plt-align
7407Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7408padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7409specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7410that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7411stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7412
7413@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7414@kindex --plt-static-chain
7415@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7416@item --plt-static-chain
7417@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7418Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7419chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7420chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7421
7422@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7423@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7424@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7425@item --plt-thread-safe
7426@itemx --no-thread-safe
7427With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7428lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7429another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7430order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7431memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7432barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7433looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7434seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7435default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7436@end table
7437
7438@ifclear GENERIC
7439@lowersections
7440@end ifclear
7441@end ifset
7442
49fa1e15
AM
7443@ifset SPU
7444@ifclear GENERIC
7445@raisesections
7446@end ifclear
7447
7448@node SPU ELF
7449@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7450
7451@cindex SPU ELF options
7452@table @option
7453
7454@cindex SPU plugins
7455@kindex --plugin
7456@item --plugin
7457This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7458
7459@cindex SPU overlays
7460@kindex --no-overlays
7461@item --no-overlays
7462Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7463regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7464@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7465turns off all this special overlay handling.
7466
7467@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7468@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7469@item --emit-stub-syms
7470This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7471symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7472
7473@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7474@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7475@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7476This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7477function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7478on calls to non-overlay regions.
7479
7480@cindex SPU local store size
7481@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7482@item --local-store=lo:hi
7483@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7484the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7485range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7486
c0065db7 7487@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7488@kindex --stack-analysis
7489@item --stack-analysis
7490SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7491unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7492under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7493@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7494@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7495determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7496for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7497for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7498for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7499find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7500and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7501under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7502dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7503is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7504and calls will be given.
7505
c0065db7 7506@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7507@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7508@item --emit-stack-syms
7509This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7510in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7511These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7512functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7513functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7514such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7515The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7516@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7517@end table
7518
7519@ifclear GENERIC
7520@lowersections
7521@end ifclear
7522@end ifset
7523
36f63dca
NC
7524@ifset TICOFF
7525@ifclear GENERIC
7526@raisesections
7527@end ifclear
7528
7529@node TI COFF
7530@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7531@cindex TI COFF versions
7532@kindex --format=@var{version}
7533The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7534TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7535also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7536format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7537header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7538
7539@ifclear GENERIC
7540@lowersections
7541@end ifclear
7542@end ifset
7543
2ca22b03
NC
7544@ifset WIN32
7545@ifclear GENERIC
7546@raisesections
7547@end ifclear
7548
7549@node WIN32
7550@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7551
c0065db7 7552This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7553See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7554command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7555
7556@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7557@cindex import libraries
7558@item import libraries
69da35b5 7559The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7560libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7561regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7562archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7563support for creating such libraries provided with the
7564@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7565
c0065db7
RM
7566@item exporting DLL symbols
7567@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7568The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7569
7570@table @emph
7571@item using auto-export functionality
7572@cindex using auto-export functionality
7573By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7574which is controlled by the following command line options:
7575
0a5d968e
NC
7576@itemize
7577@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7578@item --exclude-symbols
7579@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7580@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7581@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7582@end itemize
7583
09e2aba4
DK
7584When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7585(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7586symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7587often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7588private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7589options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7590exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7591final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7592
7593If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7594command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7595if either of the following are true:
7596
7597@itemize
7598@item A DEF file is used.
7599@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7600@end itemize
dc8465bf 7601
c0065db7
RM
7602@item using a DEF file
7603@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7604Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7605an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7606exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7607name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7608command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7609
7610@example
7611gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7612@end example
7613
0a5d968e
NC
7614Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7615@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7616
dc8465bf
NC
7617Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7618
7619@example
4b5bd4e7 7620LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7621
7622EXPORTS
7623foo
7624bar
7625_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7626another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7627var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7628doo = foo == foo2
7629eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7630@end example
dc8465bf 7631
7fcab871 7632This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7633symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7634alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7635by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7636@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7637@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7638export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7639in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7640symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7641
6b31ad16
DS
7642The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7643name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7644the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7645
b45619c0
NC
7646When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7647library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7648@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7649executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7650
7651With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7652specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7653non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7654
7655If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7656or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7657filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7658
4b5bd4e7
DS
7659The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7660
7661@example
7662EXPORTS
7663 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7664 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7665 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7666@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7667
7668Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7669@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7670@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7671@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7672Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7673@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7674string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7675
7676The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7677
7678@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7679will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7680by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7681linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7682library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7683
7684@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7685The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7686the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7687@code{*_imp__foo}).
7688
7689@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7690well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7691read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7692variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7693the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7694extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7695application will behave unexpectedly.
7696
7697@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7698it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7699symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7700API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7701the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7702
4b5bd4e7
DS
7703See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7704other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7705
7706@cindex creating a DEF file
7707While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7708with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7709
7710@item Using decorations
7711@cindex Using decorations
7712Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7713itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7714declared as:
7715
7716@example
7717__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7718__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7719@end example
7720
7721All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7722any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7723this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7724the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7725
7726Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7727decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7728instead:
7729
7730@example
7731__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7732__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7733@end example
7734
c0065db7
RM
7735This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7736when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7737variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7738code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7739of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7740omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7741@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7742information.
c0065db7 7743@end table
dc8465bf 7744
2ca22b03
NC
7745@cindex automatic data imports
7746@item automatic data imports
7747The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7748by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7749compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7750issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7751code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7752c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7753initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7754decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7755platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7756command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7757The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7758suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7759trigger the feature's use.
7760
c0065db7 7761auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7762additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7763
c0065db7 7764"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7765documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7766
c0065db7
RM
7767The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7768occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7769One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7770below.
7771
7772@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7773For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7774object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7775offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7776field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7777in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7778without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7779The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7780references.
7781
c0065db7
RM
7782The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7783be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7784themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7785runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7786compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7787support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7788run without error on an older system.
7789
c0065db7
RM
7790@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7791enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7792
7793@cindex direct linking to a dll
7794@item direct linking to a dll
7795The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7796including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7797libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7798traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7799libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7800function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7801though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7802storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7803tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7804large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7805
c0065db7 7806Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7807@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7808of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7809perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7810select the dll instead of an import library.
7811
2ca22b03 7812
69da35b5
NC
7813For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7814to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7815
7816@example
45e948fe
NC
7817libxxx.dll.a
7818xxx.dll.a
7819libxxx.a
7820xxx.lib
69da35b5 7821cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7822libxxx.dll
7823xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7824@end example
7825
69da35b5
NC
7826before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7827
c0065db7
RM
7828(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7829where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7830@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7831file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7832@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7833
c0065db7
RM
7834Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7835@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7836was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7837various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7838could coexist on the same machine.
7839
2ca22b03
NC
7840The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7841applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7842libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7843
7844@example
7845bin/
7846 cygxxx.dll
7847lib/
7848 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7849 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7850@end example
7851
c0065db7
RM
7852Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7853done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7854
78551. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7856@example
7857gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7858@end example
2ca22b03 7859
69da35b5
NC
7860However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7861(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7862@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7863not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7864
2ca22b03
NC
78652. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7866directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7867should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7868making the app/dll.
7869
7870@example
7871ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7872@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7873
7874Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7875
7876@example
7877gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7878@end example
69da35b5
NC
7879
7880This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7881perfectly legal
7882
7883@example
7884bin/
7885 cygxxx-5.dll
7886lib/
c0065db7 7887 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7888@end example
7889
dc8465bf 7890Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7891even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7892@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7893
7894Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7895wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7896
78971. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7898work with auto-imported data.
7899
dc8465bf
NC
79002. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7901import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7902symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7903for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7904possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7905
45e948fe
NC
79063. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7907critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7908in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7909stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7910
69da35b5 7911So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7912true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7913a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7914binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7915massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7916requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7917will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7918
c0065db7 7919@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7920@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7921@item adding additional names
7922Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7923A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7924exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7925when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7926import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7927
c0065db7 7928@example
dc8465bf
NC
7929LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7930
7931EXPORTS
c0065db7 7932foo
dc8465bf 7933_foo = foo
c0065db7 7934@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7935
7936The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7937
7938Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7939source code using the "weak" attribute:
7940
c0065db7
RM
7941@example
7942void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7943void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7944@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7945
7946See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7947symbols.
7948
7949@item renaming symbols
7950Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7951kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7952@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7953DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7954created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7955
c0065db7 7956@example
dc8465bf
NC
7957LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7958
7959EXPORTS
7960_foo = foo
c0065db7 7961@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7962
7963The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7964@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7965@end table
dc8465bf 7966
0a5d968e 7967Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7968unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7969If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7970@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7971that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7972@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7973renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7974to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7975the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7976In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7977which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7978
7979@cindex weak externals
7980@item weak externals
7981The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7982weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7983defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7984are three variants of weak externals:
7985@itemize
7986@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7987called lazy externals.
7988@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7989This form is not presently implemented.
7990@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7991implemented.
7992@end itemize
7993As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7994are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7995uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7996
7997@cindex aligned common symbols
7998@item aligned common symbols
7999As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8000desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8001the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8002carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8003by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8004tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8005but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8006warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8007
2ca22b03
NC
8008@end table
8009
8010@ifclear GENERIC
8011@lowersections
8012@end ifclear
8013@end ifset
8014
e0001a05
NC
8015@ifset XTENSA
8016@ifclear GENERIC
8017@raisesections
8018@end ifclear
8019
8020@node Xtensa
8021@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8022
8023@cindex Xtensa processors
8024The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8025@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8026specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8027keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8028example, with the command:
8029
8030@smallexample
8031SECTIONS
8032@{
8033 .text : @{
8034 *(.literal .text)
8035 @}
8036@}
8037@end smallexample
8038
8039@noindent
8040@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8041and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8042literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8043interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8044group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8045files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8046and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8047
43cd72b9 8048@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8049@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8050Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8051provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8052is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8053literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8054will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8055location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8056the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8057unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8058@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8059range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8060
8061For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8062to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8063instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8064instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8065instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8066@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8067hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8068By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8069switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8070density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8071instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8072performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8073linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8074a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8075
8076The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8077control the linker:
8078
8079@cindex Xtensa options
8080@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8081@item --size-opt
8082When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8083more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8084no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8085alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8086preserve the correctness of the code.
8087@end table
e0001a05
NC
8088
8089@ifclear GENERIC
8090@lowersections
8091@end ifclear
8092@end ifset
8093
252b5132
RH
8094@ifclear SingleFormat
8095@node BFD
8096@chapter BFD
8097
8098@cindex back end
8099@cindex object file management
8100@cindex object formats available
8101@kindex objdump -i
8102The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8103These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8104object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8105format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8106it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8107associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8108object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8109(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8110list all the formats available for your configuration.
8111
8112@cindex BFD requirements
8113@cindex requirements for BFD
8114As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8115several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8116BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8117formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8118been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8119BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8120may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8121
8122One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8123mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8124useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8125conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8126
8127@menu
8128* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8129@end menu
8130
8131@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8132@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8133@cindex opening object files
8134@include bfdsumm.texi
8135@end ifclear
8136
8137@node Reporting Bugs
8138@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8139@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8140@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8141
ff5dcc92 8142Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8143
8144Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8145it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8146to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8147work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8148@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8149
8150In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8151information that enables us to fix the bug.
8152
8153@menu
8154* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8155* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8156@end menu
8157
8158@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8159@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8160@cindex bug criteria
8161
8162If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8163
8164@itemize @bullet
8165@cindex fatal signal
8166@cindex linker crash
8167@cindex crash of linker
8168@item
8169If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8170@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8171
8172@cindex error on valid input
8173@item
ff5dcc92 8174If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8175
8176@cindex invalid input
8177@item
ff5dcc92 8178If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8179may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8180object files are correct.
8181
8182@item
8183If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8184improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8185@end itemize
8186
8187@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8188@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8189@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8190@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8191
8192A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8193products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8194recommend you contact that organization first.
8195
8196You can find contact information for many support companies and
8197individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8198distribution.
8199
ad22bfe8 8200@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8201Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8202@value{BUGURL}.
8203@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8204
8205The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8206@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8207fact or leave it out, state it!
8208
8209Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8210problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8211assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8212matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8213the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8214location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8215were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8216into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8217specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8218and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8219
8220Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8221the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8222on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8223
8224Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8225bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8226respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8227You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8228
8229To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8230
8231@itemize @bullet
8232@item
ff5dcc92 8233The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8234the @samp{--version} argument.
8235
8236Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8237the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8238
8239@item
ff5dcc92 8240Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8241patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8242
8243@item
8244The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8245version number.
8246
8247@item
ff5dcc92 8248What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8249``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8250
8251@item
8252The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8253observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8254list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8255sufficient.
8256
8257If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8258and then we might not encounter the bug.
8259
8260@item
8261A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8262bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8263provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8264bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8265state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8266requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8267we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8268attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8269
8270If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8271@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8272object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8273@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8274how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8275
8276@item
8277A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8278incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8279
ff5dcc92 8280Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8281will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8282not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8283a chance to make a mistake.
8284
8285Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8286say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8287copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8288C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8289and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8290fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8291you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8292any conclusion from our observations.
8293
8294@item
ff5dcc92 8295If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8296diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8297@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8298If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8299context, not by line number.
8300
8301The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8302sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8303@end itemize
8304
8305Here are some things that are not necessary:
8306
8307@itemize @bullet
8308@item
8309A description of the envelope of the bug.
8310
8311Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8312which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8313changes will not affect it.
8314
8315This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8316will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8317with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8318We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8319
8320Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8321of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8322output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8323less time, and so on.
8324
8325However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8326report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8327
8328@item
8329A patch for the bug.
8330
8331A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8332the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8333a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8334to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8335
ff5dcc92 8336Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8337construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8338through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8339able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8340fixed.
8341
8342And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8343patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8344help us to understand.
8345
8346@item
8347A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8348
8349Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8350things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8351@end itemize
8352
8353@node MRI
8354@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8355@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8356To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8357linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8358alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8359described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8360simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8361@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8362linker commands; these commands are described here.
8363
8364In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8365file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8366features to make use of them.
8367
8368You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8369@samp{-c} command-line option.
8370
8371Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8372command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8373blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8374MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8375issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8376
8377Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8378
8379You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8380lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8381The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8382
8383@table @code
8384@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8385@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8386@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8387Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8388the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8389@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8390your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8391script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8392commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8393input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8394@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8395
8396@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8397@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8398Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8399in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8400
8401@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8402
8403@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8404@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8405Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8406@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8407
8408@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8409@item BASE @var{expression}
8410Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8411absolute addresses) in the output file.
8412
8413@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8414@item CHIP @var{expression}
8415@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8416This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8417
8418@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8419@item END
8420This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8421
8422@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8423@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8424Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8425language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8426
8427@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8428@item
252b5132
RH
8429S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8430
8431@item
8432IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8433
8434@item
8435COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8436@samp{COFF}
8437@end enumerate
8438
8439@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8440@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8441Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8442@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8443
8444The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8445same line, with no change in its effect.
8446
8447@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8448@item LOAD @var{filename}
8449@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8450Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8451same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8452command line.
8453
8454@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8455@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8456@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8457MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8458option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8459
8460@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8461@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8462@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8463Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8464order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8465script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8466sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8467file, in the order specified.
8468
8469@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8470@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8471@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8472@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8473Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8474@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8475
8476@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8477@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8478@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8479@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8480You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8481specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8482If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8483@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8484@end table
8485
793c5807
NC
8486@node GNU Free Documentation License
8487@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8488@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8489
370b66a1
CD
8490@node LD Index
8491@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8492
8493@printindex cp
8494
8495@tex
7ca01ed9 8496% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8497% meantime:
8498\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8499\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8500\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8501\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8502\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8503\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8504\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8505\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8506\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8507% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8508@end tex
8509
252b5132 8510@bye
This page took 1.311934 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.